Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Germany. and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical panels. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. Add basic MEP elements. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as mechanical equipment. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. and plumbing fixtures. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. such as duct. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.

you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. On the Contents tab. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Metric file names have an _m suffix. In this exercise. When you open a training file. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. For example. views. So. however. when you add ductwork. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. You do not design entire systems. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. you can choose to save your work. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. annotations. and tags. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. templates. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. and sheets to document the project. your Training folder may be in a different location. you learn where the training files are located. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. Create detail views. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. However. as well as how to open and save them. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. is located and accessed in the training files location. Create schedules. such as templates and families. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. When you install the training files as instructed. NOTE Depending on your installation. to provide a richer and more finished design. After completing each exercise. For example. Metric: files for users working with metric units.

double-click Imperial or Metric. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. the Open dialog displays. For File name. 4 Click the training file name. For example. a list of file types displays. and click Save. scroll down.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt. You may close the file with or without saving changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. enter the new file name. 3 In the right pane.rvt) is selected.rvt and make changes. you are prompted to save the changes. and click the Training Files icon. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. select the folder in which to save the new file. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Project Files (*. if you open settings. Accessing Training Files | 5 . click ➤ Save As. For Files of type. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. 8 If you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and you can open any supported file type. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click Open. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.

6 .

the hierarchy of elements. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. every drawing sheet. You learn the terminology. 2D and 3D view. hence. schedules. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In the Revit MEP model. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. the operation of the software is parametric. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. If you move the partition. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawing sheets. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. If the length of the elevation is changed. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ 7 . The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. quantities. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. In this case. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and plans. and phases when you need it. In this case. drawings. the floor or roof remains connected. scope. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is one of association or connection. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. As you work in drawing and schedule views. sections. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. filled regions. and reference planes are datum elements. For example. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ducts. They help to describe or document the design. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. When you change something. grids. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. walls and ceilings are hosts. tags. sinks. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. and electrical panels. sprinklers. boilers. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. boilers. sprinklers. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. dimensions. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . They display in relevant views of the design. Datum elements help to define project context. dimensions. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels. and 2D detail components. For example. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. levels. sinks. tags. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Examples include detail lines. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use.

In other cases. Often. If you can draw. families. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. To place levels. you can explicitly control them. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. floors. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. schedules.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and types. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Most often. views of the project. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. you do nothing to establish these relationships. first floor. This information includes components used to design the model. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design. North . Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. programming is not required. In Revit MEP. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. from geometry to construction data. such as roofs. section views. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Project: In Revit MEP. For example. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. and so forth). The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. or bottom of foundation. top of wall. and drawings of the design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. By using a single project file. elevation views. However. and ceilings. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. you must be in a section or elevation view. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls.

although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. identical use. or layer the views to see only the one on top. However. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. System families can be transferred between projects. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can also display several project views at one time. For example. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. hiding.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. With a few clicks. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Unlike system and standard component families. such as a 30” X 42” title block. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. showing. For example. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include ducts. each in-place family contains only a single type. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. and wires. pipes. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Then experiment with them. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. A type can also be a style. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and similar graphical representation. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To return the panel to the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .

architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools used for running analysis on the current design. data and systems. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010..Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and for switching views. then select what you want to modify. When working on the Modify tab. and CAD files. and settings. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. select the tool first. project and system parameters.. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for editing existing elements.

a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. For example. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. provides access to common tools. closes the application menu (double-click). provides requested information. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. By default. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. To keep a panel expanded. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . when adding duct. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click).

(Save As) export the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.... click. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. select a template and create a new drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a file to open. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing. (Export) On the application menu.

reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . saves a current project. click. or template file..On the application menu. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. or template file. annotation. to. (Licensing) close the file. Camera. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. annotation. and Walkthrough. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. family. provides views including Default 3D. To enable or disable a tool item. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. family. but is not enabled by default... publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing.

Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. In addition. This displays the command history in a list. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation.To undo or redo a series of operations. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. check the Status Bar. workshared components. When you are highlighting an element or component. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clipboard. Group. To show the Status Bar again. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. displaying the same information. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To hide the Status Bar. However. Starting with the most recent command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). when you switch to another editing mode. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Modify. or the Family Editor. When you are using a command. repeat the command. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.

Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. select one or more elements of the same category. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. click (Modify). Place a Wall. When you place an element in a drawing. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. To change existing elements to a different type. for example. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. On the Quick Access toolbar. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 .To cancel or exit the current command.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 1 Click ➤ Open. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Zoom the view In the tutorials. For example.rvt.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. There are several ways to access zoom options. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In the following steps.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. click Training Files. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Modifying the View | 19 . 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 6 Click in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. In the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. To modify or add snap increments. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. on the Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click . 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 9 To display SteeringWheels. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. When you release the mouse button.

Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. click the SteeringWheels tab.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and then using the Zoom tool again. Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and click tin the Options dialog. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. As you move the mouse. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. press ESC.

2 Enter ZR. Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. referred to as shape handles. bottoms. display along the ends. and open Level 2 .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . called drag controls. These are the drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Similar controls. as shown. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. After you are familiar with these tasks. and select the duct.HVAC Plan . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). on the Standard toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the Undo command. In this example. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select the first item in the list. Move.3 Click and drag the bottom control. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct. you want to move the duct. and click again to specify the ending position. as shown.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 11 With the duct already selected. After selecting the element to move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click to specify the starting position. Some commands. In this case. for example. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. The duct is moved to the new position.

End a command Some commands.Supply. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. For example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 14 Enter VG. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Select Mechanical . 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.Return. 13 To end a command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Click OK. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Press ESC twice.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

click Browse. You can choose from several templates. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. select Project. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. such as ducts and pipes. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. create and manage views. New projects inherit all the families. such as coordination review and interference checking. system families. and loadable families.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Create new. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In that case. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. the default building levels and standard views. Finally. 2 In the New Project dialog. settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. and geometry from the starting template. click Training files. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. and modify system settings. and click Open. you learn how to start a project from a template. You can either select a template from the template library. such as the default project units and settings. use copy/monitor. 5 In the New Project dialog.rte template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. 6 Click OK. 27 . A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. link files. under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.

In the Choose Template dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ ■ Under Create new. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Click OK twice. navigate to Imperial Templates. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. click Edit. (Browse). 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Using the same method. If you want to use a template other than the default. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. For example. 8 In the drawing area. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. For Location. create another new project using the Construction template. Click OK. select Project template. When you select the material. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. NH. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project.7 In the Project Browser. click (Browse). review the construction materials listed. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. under Energy Analysis. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. you can select it now. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Browse. Click Cancel. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. select School or University. for Energy Data. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Level 1. for City. select Manchester. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads.rte template and click Open. and open North. ■ For Building Construction.

30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. click Wiring. and 5 1/2". 25 In the left pane. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 26 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. wiring. for 3/4". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 5 1/2". 24 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. select Identity Data.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Settings. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 27 Click OK. for 3 1/2". Click OK twice. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. For Categories. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. click Sizes. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings.rfa and click Open. 22 In the right pane. select Views. and demand factors for electrical systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. under Duct Settings. 4 1/2". Holding CTRL. for 3 1/2". piping. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Rectangular. and fire protection systems. click Round. 4 1/2". plumbing. 10 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. power distribution systems. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 11 1/2". After standard settings have been established for an organization.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and 12 1/2". Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 33 Click OK. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.

Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. click Training. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Project. and groups that are contained in a project. 5 Click OK. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. select Family and Type. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select View Name.rvt. click Browse. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. select Auto . For Then by. 4 In the New Project dialog. 38 Close the file. under Create new. From the Positioning list. select Associated Level. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Click Open. For Then by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Linking Projects In this exercise. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed.Origin to Origin. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Sort by. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. under Template file. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. families. In addition. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. sheets. To enable this coordination.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

11 In the Places dialog. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and Import dialogs. Save. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ➤ Open. and click OK twice. or families. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and select it as the library path. and change the name to My Library. Load. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. click My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click (Browse). click (Add Value). templates. click the My Library icon.

(Remove Value) to delete the library. click Places. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 11 In the Options dialog. If you want to relocate this path. select Ignore words in uppercase. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 27 Click OK. 19 Click Cancel. click OK. click the Spelling tab. view the current path. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 14 Click in the drawing area. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 9 In the text editor. custom color files. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 21 On the File Locations tab.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click Edit. click Edit. 3 Under Settings. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 2 In the Options dialog. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. such as bump maps. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 20 Click ➤ Options. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. specify the new location here. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 22 Select My Library. 5 In the text editor. If you work in a large office. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. and decal image files. enter sheetmtl-Cu.

Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 4 In the New Project dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click OK. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ .. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project.rte. work with snapping turned off. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 23 In the text editor. click Close. 25 Close the file without saving it. As you zoom in and out within a view. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and enter 1 . 6 In the Snaps dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 24 In the Options dialog. click Edit. click OK.17 In the Spelling dialog. under Template file. You can turn snap settings on and off. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save. 2 In the New Project dialog. 19 In the Options dialog. 22 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 20 Under Settings. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Restore Defaults. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click Browse. delete sheetmtl-CU. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap increments. you modify snap settings. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. click the Spelling tab. click Training Files. under Dimension Snaps. In this exercise.

8 In the Snaps dialog. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. snapping reverts to the system default settings. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel button. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.7 Under Object Snaps. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. use the wheel button on your mouse. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. While sketching. enter SM. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . zoom out until it does so. and move the cursor to the right. If it does not. deselect Chain. This is the increment that you added previously. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. For example. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design.

22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that snapping is once again active. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall..14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Do not set the wall end point. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 25 Click OK. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM. and the wall edges. If you move the cursor along the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. with or without saving it. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. and move the cursor to the right. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and delete the value 1’ . 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. the midpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

After applying a color scheme to the zones. you first configure the linked architectural model. This system consists of a cooling tower. you will understand the process. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After finishing each exercise. 45 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing.autodesk. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. go to http://www. At the end of the tutorial. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you design a mechanical system for an office building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). you first plan the system. In this lesson. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. As you create the mechanical system. and then you create a plenum level.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. methodology. By following the recommended workflow.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. duct system and a hydronic piping system. However.

you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. indicating that it’s the active view. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. and click OK. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE When working with a linked file. 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and after the linked model highlights. under Constraints. you add a level for plenums. click to select it. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. roof. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. Next.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. These components are defined in the architectural training file. ceilings. select Room Bounding. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. not in the MEP training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click Plan View Types. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. 16 Press Esc. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). and double-click West . and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. For Offset. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).6 In the Project Browser. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. and click OK. and in the Plan View Types dialog.MEP. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 On the Draw panel. enter 8'. and enter Level 2 Plenum.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. The new level is placed. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties.

NOTE After finishing each exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Plenum Plan. and then place spaces in various types of areas. for View Scale.Plenum. and click Apply Default View Template. enter 0. for View Range. select Level Above (Level 3). for Top. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. In this exercise. Under View Depth. click Edit. for Level. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. ■ Click OK twice. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. For Cut plane. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you can choose to save your work.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. select MEP . and click Properties. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and for Offset. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. right-click Level 2 Plenum. you place spaces in areas of the building model. enter an Offset of 1' 0". Under Identity Data. However. For View Classification. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. For Sub-Discipline. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . In the next exercise. for Default View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Design. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

For Offset. select Horizontal. indicating that it’s the active view. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Space Plan is highlighted. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Upper Limit. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For (Tag Location).rvt. and ceilings). select New. For Space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. walls. click Training Files. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select Level 2 Plenum. enter 0. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. Placing Spaces | 49 .

13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 219.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Click OK. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter Library. 9 Select the space.7 Click to place the space.

Placing Spaces | 51 . 21 Using the method learned previously. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. enter 0. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. For Upper Limit. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. and then click Modify. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

and then press Esc. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Upper Limit. click Training Files. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted. and for Offset. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. enter 0. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.rvt. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

the plan view would have updated with the changes. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the floor plan. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. change the space number to 216A. 11 Close the schedule view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. 10 Using the same method. In the schedule. enter Corridor. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. which was numbered 219Q. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. as shown. double-click the space name. and press Enter. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. you place a space in a chase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).

select Roof Level. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 10 In the plan view. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. 6 Enter VG. select Level 3. enter 4'. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. and click Element Properties. right-click. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. click in the chase area to place the space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Identity Data. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. For Offset. For Limit Offset. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 12 Click in the section view. expand Spaces. For Number. select Interior and Reference. enter Chase. In the plan view. for Upper Limit. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.4 Press Esc. for Name. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. select the space.

under Loaded Tags. 17 Type ZF.Bounding elements (such as walls. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. select Space Tag With Volume. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view.Space Plan. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 15 Press Esc. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . the space displays the volume up to the roof only. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and maximize the view. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and click OK. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. floors. ceilings. In the next exercises. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. All spaces in the view are tagged. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.

Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After a space is placed in an area. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click Training Files. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i.Zoning is highlighted. it is automatically added to the Default zone. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. which removes the space from the Default zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click View ➤ Zones. To display space reference lines. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In this exercise. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click Reference. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Next. indicating that it’s the active view. and Electrical 220 spaces. and click Finish Editing Zone. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. you assign spaces to a zone. select Computer Lab 222. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can add or remove a space from the zone. double-click 121 Cafeteria. under Energy Analysis. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Reference. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and modify the zone properties. Using the Edit Zone tab. The graphic in the System Browser updates. To display space reference lines. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and verify the zones in the System Browser. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that the space is occupiable. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The Zone tool is active. and click OK.rvt. and a new zone is created.Zoning is highlighted. 4 In the drawing area. the Edit Zone tab displays. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Instruction 221. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. As you do this. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Training Files. select Occupiable. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information.5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you assign spaces to zones in the building.

expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility.In the System Browser. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Expand HVAC Zones. you need to activate the zone visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. Click OK. Instruction. type VG. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).

In the left pane of the Open dialog.TIP After you finish editing the zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. In this exercise. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).West . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.rvt. You activated zone visibility in the views. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and click OK. expand 2 . click Finish Editing Zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. To display space reference lines. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Identity Data.West . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.Zoning. 11 Close the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Reference. 9 In the System Browser.Area B. click Training Files. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. under Spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Select Attached End. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 9 With the Add Space tool active. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc.Zoning view. 8 In the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.5 Click in the Level 1 .Zoning view to activate it. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. Verify that the distance is 1/2". click in the Level 2 . zoom out.

Zoning view. on the ViewCube. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Training Files. double-click the zone tag. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the corner where the Top. enter Lounge . the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In this exercise.rvt. and click OK. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click Level 1 . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. you verify the building.East. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. for Name Value. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and zone information. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.Zoning to make it the active view. Front. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. space.

4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). you isolate the space. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Next. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Using the Highlight tool. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. verify that Wireframe is selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. and select 109 Lounge. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .

select 109 Lounge. click . ■ ■ ■ Next. For Construction Type. and in the People dialog. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. For People. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select 1_South_Lounge. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). Below the list of spaces and zones. Next. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and then click OK. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click .■ On the Details tab. For Electrical Loads. and click OK. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. click . scroll down in the left pane. select Lounge/Recreation. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values.

and dehumidification set point. click (Shading). roofs. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 70.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. outdoor air per area. Next. and humidification set point.00 °F : 90. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that <Building> is selected. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. For Heating Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. For Cooling Information. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : N/A is specified. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . verify that 74. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and air changes per hour.00 °F : 54. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : N/A is specified. and other room-bounding components. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. floors. cooling air temperature. heating air temperature. Below the list of spaces and zones. This indicates the heating set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.

Modify space properties 19 Select the space. For Name. Click OK.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open MEP . and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Level 3. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plenum. For Offset. Under Energy Analysis. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. for Number. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. select Plenum. click Cancel. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. Because this is an unoccupied space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis.

click in the Value field. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. for Energy Data. select School or University. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. for City. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you verified building. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and zone information. space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. For Postal Code. click Edit.rvt. click Training Files.Space Plan. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . enter 03101. is selected. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. under Energy Analysis. double-click Level 2 . For Location. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . On the Place tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select space Plenum 212P. verify that Manchester. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NH. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and verify that the space has replaced the void. In this exercise.

verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. enter 150 Btu/h. you need to select this option.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. In order to select a space. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Latent. For Export Complexity. right-click. select Specified. or neither. under Volume Computations. select Heated and cooled. verify that 1' 0" is specified. Select Area per person. click in the Value column. For Building Construction. For Project Phase. ■ On the Weather tab. select space Library 219. and click Element Properties. If. this option adjusts the times automatically. for Building Service. verify that New Construction is selected. select Library . a cooling load.Audio Visual. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. both. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. and then click . 8 In the drawing area. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. for Values. click Edit. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Sliver Space Tolerance. and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. Under Heat Gain (per Person). In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Specified. ft. enter 200 Btu/h. Click OK twice. for Values. For Condition Type. and enter 50 sq. For Sensible. For Space Type. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. For People. For Ground Plane. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building.

Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. There should be no warnings displayed. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. click Calculate. You have verified the building information. For Building Service. Under Power. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . click Edit. For Building Construction. For Location. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. You should correct the space error in the building model. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Click OK twice. for Values. and can be modified here. for Values. 12 Click the Details tab. select 219 Library.■ ■ ■ Click OK. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. NH. Select the space associated with the warning. and under Heating Information. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. Next. and click OK. select Actual. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that Manchester. verify that School or University is selected. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. is specified. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. verify that <Building> is specified. For Electrical Loads. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). click Information).

or zone information. 3 In the drawing area. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 17 In the loads report. or make any changes to the model. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building.Space Plan. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. space. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. For Color Scheme. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. select 219 Library. In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 After you review the loads report. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. under Energy Analysis. weather. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. 15 Review the loads report for project. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. and a loads report displays. click to the right of the building to place the legend. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. and zone information for the building model. click Training Files. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . select HVAC Zones. Click OK. space. 19 In the drawing area. 21 Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

5 Zoom in to the legend. The new scheme displays in the view. in 1-ton increments. and click OK. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. select the color scheme legend. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes.

add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.

Click OK. enter Space Airflow Schedule. In this exercise. For Phase. For Name. select New Construction.Space Fill is the active view.rvt. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In the next exercise. more category options are available. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces.12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . for Select available fields from. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. select Spaces. Select Schedule building components. click Training Files. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. and Blank line. enter Airflow Delta. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Formula. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. For Type. and then click . select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. ■ Click Calculated Value. For Fields. enter . In the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Conditional Format. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula.■ Under Available fields. select Not Between. and click OK. select HVAC. For Formula. For Discipline. select Level. Header. Click OK. and then select Hidden field. click (Browse). 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Then by.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Fields dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Select Ascending. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. for Formula. select Number.

6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ The schedule displays. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . right-click to access schedule properties. Under Conditions to Use. click the color swatch.■ ■ ■ For Value. select red. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. and click OK. In the next lesson. verify that Show is highlighted. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. a view opens that contains the selected space. Click OK twice. In later exercises. For Background Color.

78 .

and work with the airflow schedule. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 79 . You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. As you place the air terminals. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. you will create supply air systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In this lesson. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you modify air terminal parameters. Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. After system creation.

and scroll to space 223. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. the space crossing lines display.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted.rvt. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Training Files. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 .

9 On the Placement panel. 13 On the Options Bar. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Place on Face.Rectangular Face Round Neck . as shown. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. which in this case is the ceiling grid.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. verify that Constrain is cleared. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . for Flow. the hosted elements are updated as well. Also. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. and select Supply Diffuser . select the diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. If the host element is modified or moved.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and then press Esc to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. enter 425 CFM. and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and press Enter. type 12.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor down. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.

navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 28 On the Placement tab. 22 In the drawing area. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. clear Leader. click Yes.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 In the Open dialog. as shown. 27 Select Return Diffuser . select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. Next. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. 21 On the Options Bar. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and then press Esc. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.rfa. 29 Place 2 diffusers. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. As you place the return diffusers. select one of the diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open.

and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. Level. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. click Yes. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. under Other. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Reference. and click OK. select one of the return diffusers. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the Project Browser. 31 In the alert dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . For the start point. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. 44 Zoom in to space 115. for Constraints ➤ Offset. ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.

2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. including energy analysis. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. After creating the logical connection. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. When you highlight a space. In this exercise. and click View ➤ Systems.Press Esc. right-click the title. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display.rvt. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. However. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.Design is highlighted. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.

and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 In the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Cancel. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 .IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. On the Options Bar. As you add diffusers to systems. Connect Into. review the Number of Elements. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. and Flow value. the number of elements is updated. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 11 In the drawing area. System Name. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout.

27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 18 Click OK. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. for System Name. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. which updates the name in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it.17 Using the method learned previously. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. Rename the system Next. 26 Click Finish Editing System. the air terminals are the children. under Identity Data. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and the system connects them. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for Mark. 25 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 22 Click OK. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.

In this case. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. which provides various layout tools. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. the Network type provides several solutions. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Network. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 4 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display. Also.Design is highlighted. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. and display solution 1. select the upper left diffuser. A Generate Layout tab displays. 5 On the Options Bar. for Solution Type.

enter 9' 10 1/2". Click OK. click Settings.Round. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. enter 3'. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Flex Duct Type. click Modify. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Maximum Flex Duct Length. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Offset. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Select Branch. For Offset. For Duct Type. For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. you’ll get an error in a later step. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. as shown.

or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 .11 Click Finish Layout. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select Duct Color Fill . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. but not all values are used in this view. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Using a flow-based color scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click to select it. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. and click OK. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. thus it is not part of the system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. If the entire network does not highlight. select By View. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. under Graphics. a disconnection exists. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. fittings. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Usually. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. for Color Scheme. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Values Displayed. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme.Flow. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. and equipment. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts.

and then press Esc to clear the selection. for Flow.Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.Airflow. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. for Schemes. under Mechanical . and press Enter.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the WSHP. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select one of the diffusers in the system. 20 In the drawing area. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. select Duct Color Fill . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.

Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Click OK. Select the upper segment of main duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click to select it. highlight a segment of the duct. click Cancel. The ductwork and fittings are updated. select Friction. and select 16". you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Restrict Height.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only. and drag it to the right. and enter . The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). for Branch Sizing.08 in-wg/100ft. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select Only.

pressure. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Use the information that displays (flow. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 35 Click Finish. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.rvt. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. click Training Files.NOTE As you inspect a system.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select the WSHP. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct.

14 In the Project Browser. Front. and click Draw Duct. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 9' 10 1/2". 15 On the ViewCube.3D MEP. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 On the Options Bar. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. click the corner where the Top. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. double-click MEP . for Offset. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.

select the top unconnected supply diffuser. it is considered a closed loop. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. the color fill indicates the flow value. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 19 In the drawing area. 22 Using the same method. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). Also.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.

106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and click to select it. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. and then click Modify.

40 Using the same method.Airflow. under Mechanical . 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and then click OK. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. such as a plenum. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. under Constraints. for Flow. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. select a segment of the main duct. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Restrict Height. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. including 2 base mounted pumps. 109 . you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Then. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. In this lesson. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model. click Training Files. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you place mechanical equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

Design is highlighted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.2-6 Tons . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. and select WSHP . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. verify that Wall faces is selected.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.High Efficiency . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Horizontal . in corridor 328.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Left Return . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click the top edge of the WSHP. verify that the WSHP is still selected. as shown. as shown. and enter 2'. 10 Select the WSHP.8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click to place the dimension. and in the Type Selector. click the dimension.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . as shown. for Offset. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 2 WSHPs. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. enter 9'. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Under Mechanical. enter 12 GPM.14 Click Modify. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Water Flow.

including flow and pressure. Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .21 Click Modify. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems). physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping.HVAC Plan . analyses cannot be performed.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.Mech 330). 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Creating a Piping System | 115 . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window.Design is highlighted. 5 In the System Browser.rvt. You can create pipes to connect system components. but without a corresponding system. where it is easier to review the information. indicating that it’s the active view.

and the Edit System tool is not active. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. Therefore. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the 2 WSHPs. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment.In the System Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Notice that on the Options Bar. This display indicates that the system is selected. while pressing Ctrl. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. As you assign equipment to systems. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. for System Name. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 10 On the Options Bar. Assigning a system component to an existing system.

enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 . You have created the hydronic return system. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design. 19 In the Project Browser. for System Name.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and select the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 17 On the Options Bar. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. under Design ➤ HVAC . Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.13 Click Finish Editing System.

28 Using the same method.22 In the Select Connector dialog. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 23 Close the roof plan view. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. expand the Hydronic Return system category. and click Expand All. and click OK. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 25 Select the boiler. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and bypasses the cooling tower. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Select. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In heating mode. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. indicating the logical connection. In cooling mode. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.

The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You also manually modify the layout path as required. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click Column Settings. for Water Flow. enter 18 GPM. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Properties. under Mechanical. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.In the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click OK.

Design is highlighted. click Training Files. the boiler. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. you can place the cursor over a system component. click Check None. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . select CHWR. 10 Click OK. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Mech 330). and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. then the Select a System dialog displays. select Mechanical Equipment. 9 In the Select a System dialog. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . press Tab to highlight the system. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. A system preview displays in red. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and click to select it. 5 In the Filter dialog. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click OK. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. indicating that it’s the active view. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.rvt.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs).

This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. or architectural components. 13 Click Cancel. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected.11 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. structural beams. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. enter 1' 6''. duct. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that Solutions is selected. For Inset. click Settings. It does not reference the architecture. select Perimeter. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.

18 Place the cursor over the piping. With each Tab. and the flow for the other is 12. the flow for one WSHP is 18. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and press Tab 3 times. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. to display the path with thinner lines. 17 Optionally.

and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and click OK. under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and access its instance properties. 22 Select the boiler. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc.

and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . 32 Click Finish Editing System. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. 28 In the Project Browser. you physically close the CHWR loop. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Logically. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. double-click Level 1 .Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. which propagates flow throughout the system. click Edit System. On the Options Bar. Next. 27 On the System Tools panel. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. 38 Using the same method. under Mechanical. access its instance properties. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. as shown. select a WSHP. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 35 Using the drag control.

select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 1' 6''. Click Settings. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select CHWS. enter 0''/12''. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 41 Click OK. For Slope. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. and then click OK. For Inset.40 In the Select a System dialog. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

as shown. 47 In the drawing area. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. (Both sections are at the same elevation. In a later exercise. as shown. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 48 While pressing Ctrl.

Add piping to close the supply loop. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or manually modify the pipe.50 Using the same method. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. To create the piping system.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan . double-click 3D HVAC Building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file. click Training Files. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design ➤ 3D Views.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. and the return pipes are magenta. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping.

and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 9 In the 3D view.

Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click OK. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. select the return pipe riser. 12 In the 3D view. The connections are automatically created. 13 In the plan view. and the lower one is secondary. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and the boiler is connected to the return piping.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. and click Draw Pipe. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the boiler. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2'.7''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . enter 1' . and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.In a plan view. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and press Enter.

The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. and click OK. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. select the primary base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select it. 18 Press Esc twice. As you place piping runs that are close together. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 19 In the plan view. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. as shown. and the appropriate fittings are created. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.

you select the tee fitting. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and click Draw Pipe. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 29 If necessary. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

31 On the Options Bar. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. 33 Press Esc. for Offset. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Draw Pipe.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump.

as shown. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 35 Using the method learned previously. these pipe connections were created automatically. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

type 1'.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and press Enter. ■ Move the cursor down. and click Draw Pipe. enter 9' 6''. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. and click to create the pipe. right-click the bottom control on the tee. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . right-click. You now have a closed loop system. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next.37 Click Modify. and click Element Properties. you validate the flow through the system.

select the cooling tower. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). and click Element Properties. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 46 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. under Mechanical. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . right-click. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the 3D view. the value is 0 GPM. In the Instance Properties dialog. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). and click OK. as shown. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 40 Click Cancel. 48 In the plan view. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Connect the cooling tower Next. The flow is being propagated through the piping. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. When you create the pumps in parallel. for Cooling Water Flow. 43 Press Esc.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method.50 or 50% of the Flow. 42 Click OK. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

52 Close the file with or without saving it. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When the valve is open. and close the dialog. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.50 In the 3D View. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. the water bypasses the cooling tower. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files.rvt. select the cooling tower. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and is heated by the boiler. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The bypass valve is closed by default. as shown. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 8 Press Esc twice.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. indicating that it’s the active view. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. and select Ball Valve . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Adding Valves | 143 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design is highlighted.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. right-click. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). In heating mode. 20 Select the bypass valve. and click Element Properties. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. 19 Using the same method. under Mechanical. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select Ball Valve . Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and click OK.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve .

HVAC Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.22 Using the method you just learned. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. as shown. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.rvt. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . indicating that it’s the active view. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Initially. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters.

and click OK. select Pipe Color Fill . for Schemes. click Pipe Color Fill .Flow. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.Size. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 .

and for Velocity. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. Click OK. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run.25 FT/100ft. and enter 2. Select And. and click to select the branch. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). for Branch Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. enter 5 FPS. select Friction. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Under Constraints.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Using the System Inspector. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. pressure. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification.rvt. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i.Design ➤ 3D Views. Inspecting the System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System | 149 . or offset elevations are incorrect.

as required. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number. flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and pressure information including pressure loss. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). This information helps you modify the system design. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system.

Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. as shown. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 10 Click Finish. and click OK. select 90° F. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.88 psi. inspect Section 6 again.89 psi.67 psi. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the Pressure Loss is 1. for Fluid Temperature. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. and to size pipe. you need to validate them. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. 9 Using the same method. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.

Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and for pipe sizing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. right-click the Systems titlebar. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. As you learned when placing components. After you assign components to a system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Warnings display. 7 In the System Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. After you have assigned all components to systems. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked.Design. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. In the System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. click Training Files. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Show to view all of the system components. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan . If you place components without assigning them to a system. For example. and double-click Level 3 .HVAC Plan . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. and click View. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 9 Right-click CHWS. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . thus assigning the components to a system. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. double-click Level 1 . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed.rvt. 4 In the System Browser. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. 6 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed.

confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned. otherwise. 12 In the System Browser. and confirm unassigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. and select Level 3 . click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open.HVAC Plan .Design floor plan. 10 Using the same methods. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 13 Right-click CHWR. right-click Hydronic Return. expand the Unassigned folder. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .

Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90. As you place components and create circuits. and demand factors that are applied in the design. click Training Files.Wire Sizes. select Wiring Types.04. enter THHN. enter 1. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ ■ For Material. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. select Copper. click (Open). ■ ■ For Factor. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select 75. Select Correction Factor. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. wiring. expand Wiring . select Copper. Click OK. For Temperature. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.rvt. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. For Temperature Rating. You also add a wiring type. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. speeding up the design phase. ■ Click New Correction Factor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. distribution systems. For Material.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Custom Colors. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. Click Background Color. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. select Red. Click OK three times. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.■ ■ For Value.

Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 167 . you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Then. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. First.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. as you place lighting fixtures. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied.

and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. By using orange as the color for this range. In the Color dialog.rvt. You can create additional color schemes. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 2 In the drawing area. select the color for Less Than 20. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. for the Spaces Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Average Estimated Illumination. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. click (Open). Click OK.Lighting Color Fill view is open. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select Orange.00 fc. Under Scheme Definition. select the color legend. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.00 fc. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Basic Colors. click Training Files.

Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. The red field will clear once the +/.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 .5 fc range is satisfied. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 13 Click the Level 2 . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Lighting Ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. zoom to space Library 219. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.7 In the Project Browser. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.277. 8 In the Project Browser. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met.

21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the fixtures will move accordingly. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 23 Click OK. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 25 On the Options Bar. 19 Press ESC to end the command. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 18 Click to place the fixture.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.

29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 28 In the drawing area. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 27 Press ESC to end the command. select Multiple.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.32 Press ESC. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . click Check None.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . 42 In the drawing area. The lighting delta is satisfied. click the ceiling grid line as shown. Note the changes for the space Library 219.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. select Multiple Alignment. 41 On the Options Bar.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. The fixture aligns.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

45 Press ESC to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

Lighting Color Fill plan.Lighting Plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. scroll to view space space Library 219. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 2 Tile the views as shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.

enter 162. click the value for Initial Intensity. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Identity Data. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select 463T5_S. ■ Click Apply. Click OK.00 lm. enter . for Type Mark. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Color Preset. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. specify 15000. Under Electrical. for Lamp. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.ies and click Open.277V and click OK. click the value for Initial Color. for Apparent Load. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. for Ballast Loss Factor. enter F15. enter . In the Select File dialog. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the Name dialog. select Xenon and click OK. and click OK.00 VA. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics.93.85. ■ Under Photometrics.

click Check None.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 10 In the Filter dialog. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Lighting Fixtures.277V. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures.

Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . 15 In space Library 219. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Placing Switches. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. junction boxes. click Training Files. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and Receptacles | 183 . 2 In the drawing area. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click (Open). and receptacles to your design. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. you add switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt.Press Delete.

277V. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes. Select Junction Boxes .NoLoad. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Placing Switches. 12 In the Load Family dialog. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.

14 Press ESC to end the command. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 21 In the drawing area. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Type Properties dialog. for Mark.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note the Number of Poles is 1. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. NOTE When entering values. enter JB-1NL. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .Offset. Under Electrical. enter 9’0”. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Edit Type. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. zoom to space Library 219. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. for Level 2 . Click OK twice. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 15 Select the junction box.

Click OK. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand Electrical. 26 In the System Browser. Select Size. 23 In the System Browser. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Receptacles | 187 . Select Load. Space Number. and Voltage. and Number of Elements. Space Name. 24 For any column. Expand General. NOTE If necessary. right-click and click Column Settings.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Junction Boxes. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Placing Switches. Distribution System.

34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

40 On the Options Bar. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 . Junction Boxes.

42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. Placing Switches.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Adding wiring to a project is optional.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. zoom to the space Electrical 220. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. and work toward the higher voltage.equipment.

15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . enter 20.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Loads. 8 Select the panelboard.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Panel Name. select 120/208 Wye. select 480/277 Wye. enter PP-2B. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. Click OK. #1 Pole Breakers. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. for Distribution System.

and for Category.Loads. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Filter dialog. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . For Panel Name. enter 20. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. for Max. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. #1 Pole Breakers. 20 In the drawing area. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter LP-2B.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 41 In the Filter dialog. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and for Category. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. click Check None.Loads. select Wires. for Hot Conductors. except without wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Click OK. enter 2. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click (Open). Click OK.

Click OK. and then expand circuit 1. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 13 In the System Browser. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and verify that Load. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Voltage. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. Expand Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Voltage Drop are selected. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. expand Power. Distribution System. ■ 16 In the System Browser. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Rating.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area.

Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Click OK. under Electrical. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 22 With the junction box still selected. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.

33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. for Type Mark. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Yes. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . note the label parameters and click Cancel. 47 In the drawing area. Click Tags. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. click below the first one to place it. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. enter FR4. click Edit Type. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 35 Press ESC to end the command.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. under Identity Data. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar.

and for Category. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Next you create a switch system. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Check None.rfa. for File Name. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. For Circuit Number. and click Apply. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click Save. 52 In the Save As dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . select Break. Click OK. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. enter a comma. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 56 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tags. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.

Click OK. Creating a Switch System | 205 . Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. click Training Files. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. click (Open). for Switch ID. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.rvt.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical . 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter b. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Click OK.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor.Lighting.

3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). select Electrical Fixtures. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. Circuits are used for power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 7 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. click Check None. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and data systems. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and for Category. click (Open). lighting. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 . The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.

Loads. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .rfa. 13 Select the wire again. enter 2. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. and click Open. and in the drawing area. 19 Click OK. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. and click Element Properties. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Wiring. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. for Hot Conductors. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Electrical . 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Click OK.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and in the right pane. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.

24 Press ESC to deselect the wires.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 22 In space Electrical 220. as shown.

and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 28 In the drawing area. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . click the connector of the first receptacle. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. in space Instruction 221. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.

then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 2 In the drawing area. Finally.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select panel LP-2B. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 In the Electrical space. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Next you balance the loads for your design. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. click Open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Training Files.rvt. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. zoom to space Electrical 220.

1-#10. Under Electrical-Loads.3616 VA). 6 Click OK. Phase B 3636 VA. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. B. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. enter 30A. for Rating. 1-#12. Scroll down. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and Phase C . 1-#10. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.3712 VA. 14 Close the warning dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.

A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Select PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . enter 25A. click Training Files. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. for Rating. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. and click OK. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. Next you create a panel schedule. enter 30A. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. and click OK. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt.Loads.15 Select panel PP-2B. under Electrical . click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected.

under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Under Body Text. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. enter 1/8. under Other. 7 Select the schedule. click Training Files. select Berlin Sans FB.Panel Schedules. Under Header Text. enter 3/32. select Bold and Italic. for Font. for Appearance. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. for Font Size.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 6 In the Project Browser. click (Open). 11 Click OK twice. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and open E601 . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. for Font Size. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).

notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Checking Your Design | 215 . 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. In the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. In the System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Unassigned. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. press TAB once. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the dialog. select MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Close the details dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. under Warnings. 18 Select panel LP-2C.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 17 In the drawing area. for Panel. zoom to space Electrical 214. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Design is open. type PVC . Adding a pipe size. and click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 219 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. In this lesson. 4 In the Name dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. in addition to loading existing families. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you create a PVC pipe type.Sanitary.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. and click Properties. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. right-click PVC .Vent. planning is critical to a successful design. In this exercise.

DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. select Sanitary. In the Project Browser. 6 Click OK. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Plastic. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 24 For Inside Diameter. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .DWV. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. select Sanitary. enter -4' . PVC . Tap. Cross. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 17 In the left pane. 25 For Outside. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.Vent is listed. Tee. under Mechanical. click Pipe Settings. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes.Sch 40 . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . enter 27/32''. for Material. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 21 In the right pane. click Training Files. click Modify. select Tee.0''. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select None. and click OK. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 26 Click OK. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.Sch 40 . 22 Click New Size.PVC . For Offset. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . and click Main. select Branch. enter 10°. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. 27 For the new pipe size. for Nominal. select Tee Vent . 18 For System Type. 15 For System Type.Sch 40 . under Pipe Types.DWV: Standard. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.PVC . enter 5/8''.DWV: Standard. enter 1/2''. 13 In the right panel. 10 On the Selection panel.PVC .rfa.5 In the Type Properties dialog.

including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. add a hot water heater. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the cold water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the hot water system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and hot and cold water piping. 221 . Create the sanitary plumbing system.

including the men’s room (space Male 107). move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.Plumbing Plan .rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 1 urinal. you add 2 toilets. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Wall Mounted.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 4 On the Element panel.6 gpf.Flush Valve .1. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 1 wall-mounted urinal. and 3 sinks. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. under Water Closet . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components. in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel. select Public . against the left wall. as shown. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 .

) 8 Press Esc. (Again. zoom in closer. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet.Wall Hung. above the first in the standard toilet space. use the reference line to center the fixture. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. under Urinal . and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face. 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. In placing the fixture.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer .2'' Drain. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. click Training Files. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 21 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and review the components listed under this system. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and click View ➤ Piping. a urinal. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system.rvt. and Default Domestic Cold Water. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 17 If all disciplines are displayed.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In this exercise. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and a floor drain. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.

open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the plan view.Design is open. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 8 In the Filter dialog.

13 In the Systems Browser. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. You include the bathroom space number in the name. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit System panel. so the Create Sanitary System is available. for System Name.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. If you deselected the drain. click Finish Editing System. expand Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. enter Sanitary 107.

16 In the Select a System dialog. and click OK. The base is placed. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select one of the components in the system. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select Sanitary 107. as shown. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .

click Solutions. for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click Settings. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Diameter. The default settings are automatically modified. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. 21 On Options Bar. and click OK. for Slope.19 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select Intersections. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter -4'-0”. enter -1' 0''. and modify it to meet project requirements. 24 In the left pane. 27 Click Modify. select Branch. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select 4''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. You accept this suggested solution. for Solution Type. select Main.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

31 Click Modify. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.30 In the 3D view. as shown. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it.

as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. select 22''x22'' . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Public. 5 On the Placement panel. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. click Training Files. and verify that Level 1 .Rectangular.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . under Lavatory . 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).rvt. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans. in the Type Selector. 4 On the Element panel.

select Multiple. TIP When entering dimensions. and press Enter to create a second sink. enter 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. For example. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. click Finish Editing System.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 12 In the drawing area. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. click Add To System. 16 On the Edit System panel. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 11 In the System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

22 In the plan view. 21 Select the tee. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and click Draw Pipe. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 19 In the 3D view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.In the System Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. with the tee fitting selected.Design ➤ 3D Views. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). as shown.

When you press the Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Offset. enter 2' . piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. and click to draw the pipe.6''. In this example. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Apply. 27 Click Modify. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog.

32 Select the double wye fitting.DWV. 31 Click Modify.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . click to place the fitting. under Wye 45 Deg Double . and when the vertical center line displays. move the cursor over the stub pipe. 29 In the Type Selector. select Standard. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.PVC .

double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. enter 1'. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 36 In the section view. 34 Press Esc. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 37 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. In the next steps. enter 6''. for Offset. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. on the Options Bar. you add pipe segments to the double wye.

and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 40 Click Modify. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). as shown.

press Spacebar. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the bottom connector. 47 Move the cursor down. 46 In the section view. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. enter 6''. 48 Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. 49 Using the same method. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views.

and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 51 In the Type Selector. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. under Trap P . 53 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . select the P-Trap on the left. select Standard. 52 In the plan view. 55 In the 3D view.PVC .Sch 40 . click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.

Move the cursor to the left. Click Modify. In the plan view.. and press Enter.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. enter 6''. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Select the double wye pipe on the left. select the left P-Trap.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector. under Pipe Types. as shown. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel.■ In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.

65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. for Slope. and verify the slope. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Training Files.rvt. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Finish. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 62 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i.

5 Select the tee. as shown.Design. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Floor level line. select the vertical stack. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Plumbing Plan .PVC . 3 In the Section view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and click to draw the pipe.Design. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . right-click the top connector. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .Overall. select Standard.Sch 40 . 7 On the Selection panel. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend .DWV. click Modify. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. and click the intersection to place the fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 9 In the Type Selector. 10 In the 3D view. select the elbow fitting on the right. and click Draw Pipe. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee.

and click the rotate control to change the orientation. as shown. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. under Plug . select Standard. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. 17 In the Type Selector.11 Click Modify. enter 1'-0”.PVC . 15 Press Esc. 13 Click the rotate control once. 18 In the plan view. for Offset. 12 Select the fitting. 14 On the Options Bar.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design is open.19 Click Modify. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.

4 In the right pane. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets. select Domestic Hot Water. select Branch. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Overall. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 7 In the left pane. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. select Branch. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . To minimize opportunities for piping interference. expand Unassigned. select Domestic Hot Water. and sinks.Design ➤ 3D Views. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. minimize the Sanitary system. if necessary. select Domestic Cold Water. and click Main. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 14 In the System Browser. select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset. under Design ➤ Plumbing . 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select Main.) 10 Click OK. click Check None. double-click 3D Plumbing . select Plumbing Fixtures. For Offset. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 9 In the left pane. for System Type. for System Type. urinal. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 6 In the left pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. and click OK. and for System Type. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 17 In the Filter dialog. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. enter 9' 3''. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 15 In the plan view.

21 On the Edit System panel.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. click Edit System. click Finish Editing System. Notice that the water main displays in blue. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 On the System Tools panel. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. In the System Browser. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. enter DCW 107. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. For Flow Conversion Method.

enter 0”/12”. enter 3' . 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. as shown. and click Draw Pipe. 33 Click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. For Slope. at the intersection of the water main pipe. enter 10'. 37 On the Options Bar. for Offset. For Offset. 28 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Selector. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. connect the second toilet. and click the connector. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 34 In the plan view. 30 In the plan view. and press Enter. select 3/4''. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the top DCW connector. enter 4'0”. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. click to the left of the urinal.2 7/8''. enter 7''. and press Enter. 31 On the Options Bar. and click to place the pipe. under Pipe Types. for Offset. as shown. select Water. select the sink above the urinal. 32 Move the cursor to the right. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink.25 Using the same method.

43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).39 Move the cursor to the left. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. and click to connect to the main cold water line. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 41 Select the top sink. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog.

44 Using the same method. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. select the 3 sinks. and verify that Level 1 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Design is open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. expand the Unassigned folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Plumbing Plan . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 2 In the Project Browser.Overall. 6 In the plan view.

the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.Tankless. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click Edit System. you edit the system to add equipment. When designing systems. Default Domestic Cold Water. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . in the Unassigned folder. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. and click OK. verify that DCW 107 is selected. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for System Name. 15 In the System Browser. under Water Heater . 10 In the System Browser.6 Gallon.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. In later steps. 14 Click Modify. Default Domestic Hot Water. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. select 0. as shown. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 13 In the plan view. 12 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.

and select Draw Pipe. 23 On the Options Bar. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and press Enter. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 27 Click Modify. 19 Select the water heater. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . for Offset. 22 In the Type Selector. 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 24 Move the cursor up. enter 1' 6''. and on the Edit System panel. right-click the middle left connector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. Slope: 0''/12''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. click Finish Editing System. 25 On the Options Bar. and click the water main line. Offset: 4' 6''. select the water heater. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 10’.

select a sink. and click Draw Pipe. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). click Edit System. 33 On the Edit System panel. for Offset. 30 On the System Tools panel. and in the System Selector. select 4'-6''. 35 On the Options Bar. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. enter 9' 0''. click Finish Editing System. enter 1' 6''. 37 On the Options Bar. and for Offset. enter 1''. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Automatically Connect to switch it off.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Diameter. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and on the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. select Domestic Hot Water 107. 36 Move the cursor down.

as shown. 42 Click Modify. and press Enter. enter 2' 8''. enter 1’. for Offset.39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. After finishing each exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. and click Duplicate. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you can choose to save your work. 267 . you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this lesson. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. You create a new pipe type.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Right-click Standard. go to http://www. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. However. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In this tutorial. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building.

In the left pane. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. structural beams. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. Next. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. click Rename. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. 9 Click OK. and enter Fire Protection Wet. However. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Main. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and click Properties. duct. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. In this exercise. For System Type. select Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. you modify the type properties of the pipe. verify that 9' 0" is selected. under Mechanical. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. For Offset. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). For System Type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. In the next exercise. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. you create project parameters and work with schedules. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. For Offset. 6 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. For Pipe Type. for Material. select Carbon Steel. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed.

For Group parameter under. select the upper half of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click Element Properties.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. Under Categories.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. under Fire Protection. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and then click OK. 5 Click OK twice. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Fire Protection. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the space crossing lines display. select Spaces. right-click.Fire Protection Plan . for Name. click Add. 8 Using a crossing window. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 6 In the drawing area. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. enter Zone 1. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 .

and click OK. enter Zone 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Sprinkler Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. to which you add various parameters. 10 In the Filter dialog. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and then access instance properties. verify that only Spaces are selected. under Fire Protection. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Zone 1.rvt. including a calculated value parameter. click Training Files. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and then click OK.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . for Name. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. indicating that it’s the active view. select Length. For Name. For Key name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Protection Area Construction Type. enter 15. select To the nearest 1'. 11 Click OK twice. Click OK. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 10 In the Format dialog. select Fire Protection. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Units.Design is highlighted. and click Field Format. Select Schedule keys.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. double-click on each column separator. select Maximum Spacing. 14 Select the new header. For Rounding. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Using the same method. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . The schedule displays. For Type of Parameter. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click the Formatting tab. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and on the ribbon. click Add Parameter. Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter Light. 9 On the Formatting tab. enter Maximum Spacing. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK. In the Maximum Spacing column. select Feet and fractional inches.

add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. 16 Using the same method.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. Unobstructed Extra. under Available fields. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Unobstructed Ordinary. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. select Spaces. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and press Enter. Click OK. enter 130. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.

and click View Properties.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Sorting/Grouping. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . 19 Click the Formatting tab. In the Fields dialog. select Number. For Then by. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. For Units. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. for Sort by. For Rounding. 20 On the Formatting tab. select 0 decimal place. select Level. Select Header and Blank line. For Formula. and click Field Format. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. select Minimum Sprinklers. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. click Edit. select Area. Click OK. select Sprinkler Zone. For Type. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Discipline. select Fixed. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Common. and click OK. under Other. click .

select Number. For Fields. right-click the schedule. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Grand totals. select Sprinkler Zone. select Level equals Level 2.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. click Edit. verify that Use default settings is selected. and click View Properties. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. and then select Hidden field. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. 27 In the drawing area. 30 Click OK twice. At the bottom of the dialog. for Filter by. For Then by (second instance). 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Hidden field. and then click Field Format. ■ In the Format dialog. for Filter.

33 Click in the grouped header cell. System Name. select Grand totals. click Edit.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. select Count. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. select Embedded Schedule. and Count. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. for Fields. select Calculate totals. double-click Type. for Embedded Schedule. and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab. delete the word Maximum. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. and click View Properties. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Sprinklers. for Available fields. under Other.

276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Light. and click OK. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. and the spacing parameter values are evident. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 46 With the space still selected. but their values are not determined. 50 Access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 43 Click Cancel. As a result. 41 In the plan view. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select space 221 Instruction. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 44 In the schedule. Unobstructed. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select Ordinary. 52 Click OK. and access the instance properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. double-click FP . under Identity Data.Fire Protection Plan Design. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. and double-click Level 2 .com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can choose to save your work. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. 279 . methodology. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the system. As you place the sprinklers. go to http://www. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you will understand the process. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. click Training Files. If the tutorial training files are not present. By following the recommended workflow. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. After finishing each exercise.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. At the end of this tutorial. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. However. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.autodesk. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.

and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. When there is a small misalignment. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

and select Sprinkler . while pressing Ctrl.Pendent . 9 In space Instruction 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 11 In the drawing area. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. as shown.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.

verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Also. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. and then press Esc. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.

18 Type WT. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. enter 14' 6". 23 Right-click the sprinkler.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 19 In the floor plan. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. move the cursor to the right. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. open Design ➤ FP . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 .FP_Ceiling view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. enter 11. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 22 In the 200A Corridor space.Design. you adjust the offset. under Constraints. Next. and click Element Properties. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. For Number. and press Enter. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 17 In the Project Browser. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. specify a vertical offset. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. for Offset. Notice that the schedule updates. 25 Click OK. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and 200C).Fire Protection Plan . zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. This number is determined in the schedule. 200B. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 10' 6". You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 16 Close the ceiling plan view. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 Press Esc.

physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Fire Protection Plan . Creating a Piping System In this exercise. In this exercise. However. click Training Files. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Unlike logical connections (systems). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 1 In the Project Browser. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and with piping (physical connection). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. After creating the logical connection. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.

In the System Browser. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 5 Right-click the header. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Creating a Piping System | 285 . within the Piping Systems folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. and select Piping. As you assign sprinklers to systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. named Fire Protection Wet. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

For Pipe Type. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. providing system editing tools. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. for System Name. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. system equipment. press Tab. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. The Edit Piping System panel displays. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. indicating the logical connection. place the cursor over a sprinkler. 15 In the drawing area.Wet is selected. 13 In the System Browser. 19 Click OK. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and click Select. verify that Main is selected. click Settings. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and select the system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and a piping layout preview displays. and on the Options Bar. In the left pane. For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. The Generate Layout tools are activated. Next. 11 With the system still selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and number of elements in the system. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. select an initial piping layout. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. select Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers.

21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. and select solution 5. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell.20 On the Generate Layout panel. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. for Diameter. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. select 2". verify that Network is selected. enter -12' 0". The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. When the layout is finished. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. In general. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . click Solutions. 23 For Offset. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 22 On the Options Bar. as shown.

All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. 29 Click Finish Layout. On the Generate Layout panel. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. A (parallel movement control) displays. as shown. click Modify.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . select a different layout solution. Next. or manually modify the pipe. Either relocate the system components. or that offset elevations are incorrect. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. and various manual pipe creation tools.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 32 If necessary. and then you create piping to physically connect them.

rvt.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 1 In the Project Browser. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary.Design is highlighted. and select the elbow fitting as shown.

mechanical equipment. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. verify that Network is selected. 11 On the Generate Layout panel.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. radiators. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. you can select the pipe or duct. 5 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 8 In the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). 14 Close the System Browser. 13 Click Finish Layout. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and select solution 5. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 9 On the Edit System panel. or a system component to display system tools. 18 Click Finish Editing System. air terminals. click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. verify that Solutions is selected. for Solution Type. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. click Add To System. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor.

23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 On the Options Bar. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and click Draw Pipe. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. and then tile the views. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. for Offset. 29 Using the same method. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 21 In the Piping Plan. select 9'.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 28 In the drawing area. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. right-click. 25 Select the sprinkler. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.20 Open Design ➤ FP .

33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

4 On the Options Bar. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point.Design is highlighted. ■ 6 Press Esc. for Scale. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. click Training Files. select 1/4" = 1'-0". You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. double-click on the section head to open the section view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 4".

as shown. and maximize the floor plan. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and then tag the piping as shown. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. The pipe diameter is modified. for Diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select 1 1/4". 25 On the Options Bar. 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers.

you created a wet fire protection system. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. You added tags to pipes. In this tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. For additional practice. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems.

Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. add annotations and dimensions. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.

306 .

a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. right-click Copy of Level 1. and apply a view template. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Floor Plans. and view references. 307 . You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 3 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. and click Properties.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. matchlines. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. dependent views. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. If the view included detail graphics. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.

5 In the Instance Properties dialog.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. as shown. and then press Esc. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Apply Default View Template. more focused. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. create dependent views for areas B and C. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. views and put them on the sheet. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. and click Rename. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. 4 Using the same method. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 9 Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. click Training Files. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 6 In the Project Browser. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style.

13 Press Esc twice. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Color dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area. select 11./ ---). 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Double Dash 5/8". select black. on the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . For Line Pattern. click the current value. for Target view. and then press Esc. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. Click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. For Line Weight. 21 Using the same method.

24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and zoom to each of the view references. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 27 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets.

and select the section box.29 Close the file with or without saving it. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 2 Zoom in.rvt. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.Domestic Water. for View Classification. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . Click OK. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and click to select it. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics. select Plumbing. enter Plumbing Isometric . and click Apply Default View Template. select Documentation. For Sub-Discipline. The section crop lines no longer display. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template.Domestic Water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . for View Name. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing Isometric. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. click Training Files.

select Dash. and click to select it. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. press Tab 3 times. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 12 Using the same method. select 3. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. Click Apply. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and then click OK. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".9 Right-click.

13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 14 Right-click. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . as shown).

16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 17 Label the fixtures as shown. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. In the drawing area. Right-click.Sanitary Waste. click Reveal Hidden Elements. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label.15 Press Esc. On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. 18 Using methods learned previously. On the View Control Bar. press Tab 3 times.Domestic Water view with detailing. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. for Rounding.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. 21 Click OK twice. For Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . verify that Common is selected. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you use a plan view to create a callout view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 1/8". 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click on the Format value. as shown. 25 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet.

6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. indicating that it’s the active view. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). select 1/4"=1'-0''.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. for Scale. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i.

double-click M601 . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. using the same method. Click OK. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. for Line Weight. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. drag it to the sheet. select 5. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Sheets (all). Creating Callout Views | 317 . and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections.

The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. For Default View Template. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. For Title on Sheet. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the callout view. Click OK. for View Name. and select the viewport. 17 In the Project Browser. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 .

enter Typical WSHP Detail. under Names. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Apply View Template. and click OK. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Rename. right-click the detail view.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Rename View dialog. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

■ work with model-based components. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. duct tags. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. linetypes. and annotation to create a legend. 321 .

as shown. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.rvt. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Creating Annotations In this exercise. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view.

Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Creating Annotations | 323 . and a segment of rectangular duct. verify that Leader is cleared. 16 In the drawing area. and then click Right Straight. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a segment of round duct.9 Press Esc twice. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. select a supply diffuser. a return diffuser.

If necessary. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 20 In the Tags dialog. clear Leader.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Click Modify. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.rfa. under Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click OK.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. for Ducts. and click Open. 21 In the Load Family dialog. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. click Load.

and Attached End. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then press Esc. Creating Annotations | 325 . 31 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. select Horizontal. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. Leader. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.25 In the drawing area.

click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. select Free End. for Leader. as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .33 On the Options Bar.

37 In the drawing area. and lock lighting fixtures. That’s because you changed a type property. lay out. for Leader Arrowhead. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.36 Press Esc twice. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. select Dot Open 1/16". Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and click OK. select the last tag placed. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and all elements of that type are affected. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. not simply an instance property. 40 Using the method learned previously. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

rvt. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the dimension line. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 12 Press Esc. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

enter 8'. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. and offset them 8' from the wall. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Creating a Legend In this exercise. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.13 Using the same method. annotation symbols. linework. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 19 Using the same methods. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.3 1/2"). 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and notes. Because the dimensions are locked. 16 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 329 .

and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 5 Click in the drawing area.8 Neck. select Floor Plan. click Training Files. 10 Using the same method. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click below the title to place the diffuser. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select 1/4" = 1' -0". 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 9 In the drawing area. Click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .rvt. enter Diffuser Legend. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For Scale.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click next to the top diffuser. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 14 In the drawing area.11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 331 . and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER.

21 Press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 24 Select the component’s break line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . The selected detail lines are now thin. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 26 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down.DROP and its text note.

30 Select Spot Elevation . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 35 Change the text on the right to N. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. Creating a Legend | 333 .MECHANICAL LEGEND. enter E. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify.

40 Press Esc.39 With the viewport still selected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. 335 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . detail groups. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting view using detail components. and text.rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. indicating that it’s the active view.

you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Next. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 4 On the Options Bar. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101.113 East on the sheet. and then modify and align the views.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . clear Leader. 5 In the drawing area. place Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . select each of the 2 panelboards. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and click to place it. 8 Using the same method.

13 Right-click. and click OK. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click Deactivate View. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. select the 113 North view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. under Identity Data. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. giving the appearance of a single view. for Title on Sheet. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. and click Activate View.

Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. right-click. right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. In the next exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Press Esc. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you add wiring to the diagram. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. 21 Using the drag control. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. as shown. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click New. verify that Chain is selected. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 .Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.rvt. expand Lines. In the New Subcategory dialog. and then click OK. Under Modify Subcategories. As you draw. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 9 Beginning at the transformer. select 6. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . as shown. for Line Weight. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. and click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 8 On the Options Bar.113 North view. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. indicating that it’s the active view. notice that there are no snaps active. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. In the Line Styles dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. enter Electrical Power.

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). as shown. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset. enter 1/8".10 Press Esc. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. 13 On the Options Bar.

17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. so that the result is as shown.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 28 Click above the cap. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. for Offset. enter 3/32". enter 0 0.36 Press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 40 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 42 On the Options Bar. 39 Move the cursor to the right. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and press Enter.5.

Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. select all 3 lines. 47 In the drawing area. 46 In the Project Browser.25. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Press Esc. Using the same method. for Name. click on the length dimension value.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and then press Esc. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and click OK. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. enter Ground. while pressing Ctrl. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 50 With the group selected.125. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 0 0. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0.

54 Select the group. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 52 Select the detail group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.51 Using the method learned previously. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . TP-2B.

and click Rename. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. click Training Files. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 5 Zoom in to view the section. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. 2 Right-click the copy. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. In later exercises. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and will place it on sheet E01. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. for Name. and click OK.

and Left sides converge. click Home. and then click the corner where the Top. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Back. and then press Esc. 7 On the ViewCube.6 Select the section box. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

select 3D HVAC Iso. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Apply View Template. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 3D Views. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. right-click. Click OK. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Under Names. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Walkthroughs. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.

and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor down and to the left. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Typical. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). as shown. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 15 Using the same method. 19 Complete the text labels. and click to specify the second leader point. (Right).

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and under Extents. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 25 Click OK. as shown. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 24 Access the instance properties for the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. and then click OK. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible.

Drafting Detail Components | 353 . right-click the view name. 3 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Properties. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Use detail lines to create a detail group. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. For Scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. Click OK. select 3" = 1'-0". By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. click Training Files.29 In the drawing area. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. select the isometric view. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Place a detail component. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 9 Zoom in to the component. For View Classification. click the point at the top of the drain. select Documentation. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Plumbing. Click OK. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". for Sub-Discipline. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 12 On the Element panel. 13 In the drawing area. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then press Esc. 18 With the filled region still selected. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Type. select C. 20 Select 1. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.P. (Line). click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Concrete. select the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 21 In the drawing area. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.28 Click Modify. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 34 Press Esc. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. select Multiple. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click to select them.

43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then press Esc. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. as shown. Drafting Detail Components | 357 .38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 40 Click Finish Region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. (Rectangle). and then select the side of the slab above the line.

and click OK. 49 Click Modify. 52 In the Create Group dialog. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.D. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. as shown.. for Name. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. press Tab to highlight the chain. select the Flashing Membrane group. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Flashing Membrane_F.

61 Using the same method. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.55 Press Esc. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown.

select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 72 If necessary. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar. as shown. and then click OK. select Leader and Free End.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16.62 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 71 Click Modify. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.

and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. and click to specify the second leader point.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 80 Press Esc twice. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 78 Move the cursor to the left. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 81 Select the text note. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the text insertion point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

open P103 . select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 90 Press Esc. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc twice. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 88 In the drawing area.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 3. For Import units. For Colors.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. you import a CAD detail drawing. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Click Open. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Line Weight. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. select Auto-Detect. select Black and White.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. For Layers. select Visible. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view.dwg. click Training Files. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing.

and then press Esc. 11 Press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.8 Type ZF. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 12 In the drawing area. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . select the viewport title. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful